Está en la página 1de 458

s

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2004

Issued by the Information and Communication Networks Group


Hofmannstraße 51
D-81359 München

Technical modifications possible.


Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

This document consists of a total of 458 pages. All pages are issue 1.

1 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 1


1.1 Using this Help System ...................................................................... 1
1.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ............................................................ 2
1.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software.................................................. 3
1.4 Abbreviations ...................................................................................... 4
2 General 15
2.1 Network Element Configuration........................................................ 15
2.2 Module View, Single-row Subrack.................................................... 17
2.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack .................................................. 20
2.4 Option Settings ................................................................................. 23
2.5 Actual Equipping Information............................................................ 25
2.6 Script Configuration .......................................................................... 26
2.7 EOW Configurations......................................................................... 30
3 Extension Shelf 31
3.1 Extension Shelf Configuration .......................................................... 31
3.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration ....................................................... 32
3.3 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow ............................................. 33
3.4 Extension Link Protection Configuration .......................................... 34
3.5 ISTM 4 Configuration........................................................................ 35
4 Traffic 37
4.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 37
4.2 STM-4 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 38
4.3 STM-16 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 39
4.4 STM-64 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 40
4.5 ETH Traffic Flow............................................................................... 41
4.6 ETH Configuration ............................................................................ 42
4.7 GFP Group Traffic Flow.................................................................... 44
4.8 STM-N Configuration........................................................................ 45
4.9 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .................................................. 49
4.10 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .................................................. 50
4.11 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ........................ 51
4.12 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ........................ 52
4.13 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ........................................................... 53
4.14 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ........................................................... 54
4.15 4F SPRING Traffic Flow ................................................................... 55
4.16 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration........................................................ 56
4.17 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................... 58
4.18 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 59
4.19 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 60
4.20 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ..................................... 61
4.21 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow................................. 62
4.22 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards........................................ 63
4.23 VC4 Selection with LNQ622M or Switch Fabric Cards .................... 64
4.24 STM-16 AU4/VC4 4F-SPRING Selection......................................... 65
4.25 VC4 Multiplex Structure.................................................................... 66
4.26 E12 Traffic Flow................................................................................ 67
4.27 E12 Configuration............................................................................. 68
4.28 AU4/VCn Configuration .................................................................... 70
4.29 VC4 Configuration ............................................................................ 72
4.30 VC12 Configuration .......................................................................... 75
4.31 VC12-2v Configuration ..................................................................... 78
4.32 VC Group VC3-2v Configuration ...................................................... 79
4.33 VC Group Concatenated VC4 Configuration.................................... 80

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 i
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.34 Port Configuration............................................................................. 81


4.35 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards ................................................ 83
4.36 Cross Connections List..................................................................... 85
4.37 Add Cross Connection...................................................................... 87
4.38 Cross Connection Details ................................................................. 89
4.39 Cross Connections Graphic.............................................................. 90
4.40 Overhead Cross Connections .......................................................... 92
5 Protection 95
5.1 Protection Management ................................................................... 95
5.2 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .................................................. 97
5.3 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ........................................................... 98
5.4 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ........................................................... 99
5.5 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ................................................ 100
5.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 101
5.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 102
5.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 103
5.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Prepared 2F-SPRING Selection....................... 104
5.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Prepared 2F-SPRING Selection....................... 105
5.11 STM-16 AU4/VC4 2F-SPRING Selection....................................... 106
5.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 2F-SPRING Selection....................................... 107
5.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 4F-SPRING Selection....................................... 108
5.14 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ................................... 109
5.15 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ................................... 110
5.16 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................... 111
5.17 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................... 112
5.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................... 113
5.19 2F-SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 114
5.20 4F SPRING Traffic Flow ................................................................. 116
5.21 4F-SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 117
5.22 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration........................................ 120
5.23 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration......................................... 122
5.24 Add 1:N MSP .................................................................................. 123
5.25 Add Working Ports.......................................................................... 124
5.26 Working VC4 Selection................................................................... 125
5.27 Working STM-1 Selection............................................................... 126
5.28 RPR Feeder Performance .............................................................. 127
5.29 RPR Ring Performance .................................................................. 130
5.30 RPR Switch Configuration .............................................................. 133
5.31 Copy to Permanent MACs.............................................................. 136
5.32 Adding a Permanent Entry ............................................................. 137
5.33 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow ........................................... 138
5.34 Extension Link Protection Configuration ........................................ 139
5.35 Add Extension Link Protection View............................................... 140
5.36 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow................................................. 142
5.37 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow ..................................................... 143
5.38 1:N MSP Configuration................................................................... 144
5.39 1:N MSP Extension ........................................................................ 146
6 Cards 147
6.1 Card Equipment Configuration ....................................................... 147
6.2 Possible Equipping Information ...................................................... 148
6.3 Port Provisioning Configuration ...................................................... 149
6.4 SCOH Card Configuration .............................................................. 150
6.5 Card Configuration for SDH Cards................................................. 151
6.6 Card Configuration for ETH Cards ................................................. 152
6.7 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration ............................................ 153
6.8 SF160G Card Configuration ........................................................... 155
6.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ..................................................... 156

ii A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.10 IF2M Card Configuration ................................................................ 157


6.11 CLU Card Configuration ................................................................. 159
6.12 SCOH Card Label Information........................................................ 160
6.13 Card Label Information for 1-Port Interfaces .................................. 161
6.14 Card Label Information for 4-Port Interfaces .................................. 162
6.15 Card Label Information for 8-Port Interfaces .................................. 163
6.16 Card Label Information ................................................................... 164
6.17 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information............................................... 165
7 Data 167
7.1 TIF Configuration............................................................................ 167
7.2 Subrack Data .................................................................................. 168
7.3 Card Inventory Summary................................................................ 169
7.4 Copy Data....................................................................................... 170
7.5 Copy Card Data .............................................................................. 172
7.6 Log Records Attribute..................................................................... 173
7.7 DB Management Configuration ...................................................... 174
7.8 DB Upload Dialog ........................................................................... 176
7.9 DB Download Dialog ...................................................................... 177
7.10 ASIC Data Information.................................................................... 178
7.11 NE Logs Information....................................................................... 179
8 Performance 181
8.1 MSTTP Near End Performance...................................................... 181
8.2 MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 185
8.3 RSTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 189
8.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance ...................................... 193
8.5 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................ 194
8.6 MCF DCC Linkage Performance.................................................... 197
8.7 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance.............................................. 199
8.8 Ethernet Packet Performance ........................................................ 201
8.9 TCA List .......................................................................................... 203
8.10 AU4 PJE Performance ................................................................... 205
8.11 VC12 Near End Performance......................................................... 207
8.12 VC12 Far End Performance ........................................................... 211
8.13 VCCTP Near End Performance...................................................... 215
8.14 VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 219
8.15 VCTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 223
8.16 VCTTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 227
8.17 STM-64 Gauge Performance ......................................................... 231
9 MCF 235
9.1 Message Communication Functions .............................................. 235
9.2 MCF Transport Connection Information ......................................... 236
9.3 MCF Transport Connection Performance ...................................... 238
9.4 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information...................................... 239
9.5 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................ 241
9.6 MCF DCC Configuration................................................................. 244
9.7 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ................................................... 246
9.8 MCF DCC Linkage Performance.................................................... 248
9.9 Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................ 250
9.10 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address............................................ 252
9.11 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration ............................................. 253
9.12 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance.............................................. 255
9.13 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ...................................... 257
9.14 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration............................................ 258
9.15 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address .......................................... 261

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 iii
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10 Timing 263
10.1 Date / Time Configuration............................................................... 263
10.2 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration................................ 264
10.3 T0 Configuration ............................................................................. 267
10.4 T1 Configuration ............................................................................. 268
10.5 T3 Configuration ............................................................................. 269
10.6 T4 Configuration ............................................................................. 271
11 Alarms 273
11.1 Alarm List........................................................................................ 273
11.2 Alarms............................................................................................. 276
11.3 Communication Alarm Feature Table............................................. 278
11.4 NEAP Configuration ....................................................................... 283
12 Enhanced Traffic Configurations 285
12.1 Concatenation Group Templates ................................................... 285
12.2 Modify Template ............................................................................. 286
12.3 Concatenation Configuration .......................................................... 287
12.4 Add Concatenation Group .............................................................. 289
12.5 VC4-2v Virtual AU4/VC4 Selection ................................................ 290
12.6 VC4-16v Virtual AU4/VC4 Selection .............................................. 291
12.7 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection....................................................... 292
12.8 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection................................................................. 293
12.9 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection................................................................. 294
12.10 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection ............................................................ 295
12.11 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration................................................... 296
12.12 Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration................................................... 298
12.13 Virtual VC4/VC3 Configuration................................................... 300
12.14 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection ................................................ 302
12.15 Virtual VC12 Configuration......................................................... 303
12.16 Neighbour Ports ......................................................................... 305
12.17 GFP Assignment ........................................................................ 306
12.18 GFP Group Subview .................................................................. 308
12.19 GFP Group Traffic Flow ............................................................. 309
12.20 PF2G5 GFP Assignment............................................................ 310
12.21 IFOFES-E GFP Assignment ...................................................... 312
12.22 PF2G5 GFP Port Configuration ................................................. 314
12.23 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration ....................... 316
12.24 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration........................ 317
12.25 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration........................ 318
12.26 PF2G5 Add CUG........................................................................ 319
13 TCP/IP Configurations 321
13.1 IP Addresses Configuration............................................................ 321
13.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify ............................................................. 324
13.3 IP Static Routing Configuration ...................................................... 325
13.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................ 327
13.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify........................................................ 328
13.6 OSPF Configuration ....................................................................... 329
13.7 OSPF Areas Configuration ............................................................. 331
13.8 OSPF Areas Entry Modify .............................................................. 333
13.9 OSPF Area Metric Configuration .................................................... 334
13.10 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration....................................... 335
13.11 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add............................................. 337
13.12 OSPF Interfaces Configuration .................................................. 338
13.13 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add........................................................ 340
13.14 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ......................................... 342
13.15 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration ....................................... 343
13.16 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add............................................. 345

iv A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.17 OSPF Neighbours Information ................................................... 346


13.18 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information........................................ 348
13.19 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details ..................................... 350
13.20 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................ 351
13.21 OSPF LSDB Entry Details.......................................................... 353
13.22 OSPF External LSDB Information.............................................. 354
13.23 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ........................................... 356
13.24 TCP Connections Information .................................................... 357
13.25 TCP Connections Entry Details.................................................. 359
14 Security 361
14.1 Access Information ......................................................................... 361
14.2 NMS NE Password......................................................................... 362
14.3 Change Password to Default.......................................................... 363
15 Software 365
15.1 Software Management ................................................................... 365
15.2 Software Download ........................................................................ 367
15.3 Delta Software Download ............................................................... 368
15.4 APS Compatibility Information........................................................ 369
15.5 Active APS Record ......................................................................... 370
16 How to ... 371
16.1 How to Configure the Equipping..................................................... 371
16.2 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards...................................... 372
16.3 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports .......................................... 373
16.4 How to Configure NSAP Settings ................................................... 374
16.5 How to Configure the Timing .......................................................... 375
16.6 How to Set Sync Priorities .............................................................. 376
16.7 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling................................ 377
16.8 How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................ 378
16.9 How to Create a Cross Connection................................................ 379
16.10 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options................ 380
16.11 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection ................ 381
16.12 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection ................ 382
16.13 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection .............. 383
16.14 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection ................ 384
16.15 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection ........................ 385
16.16 How to Create a Cross Connection from a
Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR........................................... 386
16.17 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ............................... 387
16.18 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection............................ 388
16.19 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection .......................... 389
16.20 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ........... 390
16.21 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection.................. 391
16.22 How to Delete a Cross Connection ............................................ 392
16.23 How to Create an OH Cross Connection ................................... 393
16.24 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options ......... 394
16.25 How to Delete OH Cross Connections....................................... 395
16.26 How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections.................... 396
16.27 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection 397
16.28 How to Create / Delete VC Channels......................................... 398
16.29 How to Configure and Activate Path Protections ....................... 399
16.30 How to Add and Remove Path Protections................................ 400
16.31 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection ..................... 401
16.32 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection ..................... 402
16.33 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection ...................... 403
16.34 How to Create an SNCP Protection ........................................... 404
16.35 How to Modify / Delete an SNCP Protection.............................. 405

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 v
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.36 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path .......... 406


16.37 How to Configure SDH Concatenations..................................... 408
16.38 How to Configure ETH Concatenations ..................................... 409
16.39 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel .................... 410
16.40 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups............................... 411
16.41 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG ..................................... 412
16.42 How to Specify the CUG Service Class ..................................... 414
16.43 How to Configure RPR Protection.............................................. 415
16.44 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ........................................... 416
16.45 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic.... 417
16.46 How to Configure TIF Ports........................................................ 418
16.47 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations
from Object to Object ................................................................. 419
16.48 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object .......... 420
16.49 How to Download VCDB Files ................................................... 421
16.50 How to Upload VCDB Files ........................................................ 422
16.51 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH .............................. 423
16.52 How to Change a Defective SCOH ............................................ 424
16.53 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ............ 427
16.54 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC 430
17 Fault Clearance 435
17.1 SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance ............................. 435
17.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................... 439
17.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance....................................... 443
17.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance............................................... 446
17.5 Fan Unit Fault Clearance................................................................ 449
17.6 TIF Fault Clearance........................................................................ 450

vi A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

1 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070

1.1 Using this Help System


This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070,
repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").

Displaying help topics

In the Help menu, click Help Topics...

The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents,
an index, and a full-text search function.

Displaying the help of the currently open window

Press the F1 key

or

Click the question mark button in the toolbar

or

In the Help menu, click On Window... F1.

Displaying information on the software

In the Help menu, click About...

Notes

Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.

If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding
SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases,
there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.

[4205]

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 1
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

1.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features


The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and cross-
connect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as

• TMX (terminal multiplexer),

• ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or

• small LXC (local cross-connect).

in multi-service access and edge network applications.

The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point


connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.

According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:

• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,

• Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),

• Feeder network functionalities.

The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional
sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features,
such as:

• Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,

• Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,

• Virtual concatenation,

• 2-fiber ring protection,

• 4-fiber ring protection,

• RPR functionalities,

• Closed User Groups (CUG),

• EOW functions.

2 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

1.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software


The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists
of the following components:

• Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware.


(HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or
Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software pack-
age.)

• The OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack)
software,

• NE Proxy software,

• TNMS CT software,

• Java Virtual Machine software,

• SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 3
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

1.4 Abbreviations

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AFI Authority and Format Identifier

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

AK TPDU Data Acknowledge TPDU

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photo Diode

APS Automatic Protection Switching or Application Program Switching

AS Alarm Suppression

ASBR Autonomous System Border Router

ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)

ASW Application Software

AU Administrative Unit

AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4

AUI Attachment Unit Interface

AUX Auxiliary Channel

BASW Basic Software

BBE Background Block Error

BDM Background Debug Mode Interface

BER Bit Error Ratio

CC Cross Connect/Cross Connection

CD Collision Detection

CE Communauté Européenne

CF Card Failure

CFG Configuration

CH Channel

CL Configuration Log

4 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Service

CLR Clear

CLU Central Clock Unit

CPL Current Problem List

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRS Card Release State

CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1

CSO Card Switch Off

CT Card Type

CTP Connection Termination Point

CUG Closed User Group

DB Data Base

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus

DCCM DCC Bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex Section)

DCCR DCC Bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator Section)

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DEC Decimal

DEMUX Demultiplexer

DL Data Link

DNU Do Not Use

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DSP Domain Specific Part

E4 Electrical Interface Signal

EBC Error Block Count

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 5
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

ECCM ECC for Multiplex Section

ECCR ECC for Regeneration Section

EDI Equipment Defect Indication

EDI Electronic Data Interchange

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EM Element Manager

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EPS Equipment Protection Switch

ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ETS European Telecommunication Standard

ETH Ethernet

ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EXC Excessive Bit Error Rate

F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal

FAA Fan Alarm Adapter

FAS Frame Alignment Signal

FC/PC Connector Type

FE Far End

FEBE Far End Block Error

FEC Forward Error Correction

FEPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

FERF Far End Receive Error

FG Functional Group

FIFO First In First Out

FM Fault Management

FO Fiber Optic

FOD Fiber Optic Distributor

FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol

6 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

FOT Fail of Topology

FTA File Transfer Area

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FU Functional Unit

FW Firmware

GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMT Greenwich Mean Time

GTP Group Termination Point

GUI Graphical User Interface

HW Hardware

HEL Historical Event Log

HO Higher Order

ICB Internal Control Bus

ICS Internal Communication System

ICU Internal Control Unit

ID Identification

IDI Initial Domain Identifier

IDP Initial Domain Part

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IF Interface

IF2M Electrical E1 Interface Card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s

IFO155M Optical STM-1 Card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFO155M-E Electrical STM-1 Card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFOFE Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet Card

IFOFE-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet Card, VC-4 or VC-3

IFOFES-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet Card, VC-3 or VC12

IFQ2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 7
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

IFQ622M Optical STM-4 Card, Quad 622 Mbit/s

IFQGBE Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card

IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card

IFS10G Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s

IFS10G-M Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM

IFS10G-R Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM

IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes

IFS2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s

IFS2G5B Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, with SFP modules

IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s

IMN Installation Manual

IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source

INT Internal Supervision

I/O Input/Output

IP Internet Protocol

IS Intermediate System

ISDH Internal SDH Signal

ISF ISDH Signal Fail

ISO International Standards Organization

ISTM Internal Synchronous Transport Module

ISU ISDH Switch Layer Unit

ITMN Installation and Test Manual

ITU International Telecommunication Union

K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching

KBUS K-byte BUS for MSP Control

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D Channel

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

8 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

LO Lower Order

LO SF Lower Order Switching Fabric

LOF Loss of Frame

LOL Loss of Lock

LOM Loss of Marker

LOP Loss of Pointer

LOS Loss of Signal

LSDB Link State Data Base

LT Line Termination

LT0 Loss of T0 clock

LTI Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)

LTS Loss of Timing Source

MAC Media Access Control

MACAT Media Access Control Address Table

MCF Message Communication Functions

MDI Multiple Document Interface

MIB Management Information Base

MIBS Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer

MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace

MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Trace

MMC Multimedia Card

MMI Man Machine Interface

MS Multiplex Section

MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication

MSFERF Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure

MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection

MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Function

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 9
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

MTS Multiplexer Timing Source

MTTR Mean Time to Repair

NC/P Network Connection Protection

NCT Network Craft Terminal

NE Network Element

NEC Network Element Controller

NEAP Network Element Alarm Panel

NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit

NRZ Non Return to Zero

NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert

NSAP Network Service Access Point

OAS Optical Amplifier Section

OGL Operator Guidelines

OH Overhead

OHCC Overhead Cross Connections

OHF Overhead Functions

OH-IF Overhead Interface

OGL Operator Guidelines

OOF Out of Frame

OS Optical Section

OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio

OSPF Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)

P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal

P Protection

PCS Plesiochronous Connection Supervision

PCU Peripheral Control Unit

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

10 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

PET Possible Equipping Table

PF2G5 Packet Switch Fabric Card

PJE Pointer Justification Event

PLL Phase Locked Loop

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLP Packet Level Protection

PM Performance Management or Performance Monitoring

POH Path Overhead

POM Path Overhead Monitoring

PP Path Protection

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory

PSE Path Switching Event

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTI Path Trace Identifier

Q Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN

QECC Q-Interface via DCC

Q-F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal

QOS Quality of Service

QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT

Qx Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

RAM Random Access Memory

RAP Reachable Address Prefix

RD Read

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REI Remote Error Indication

RFI Remote Failure Indication

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 11
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer

RL Remote Loop

RLC Remote Loop Control

ROM Read-Only Memory

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RS Regenerator Section

RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

RTC Real Time Clock

RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier

Rx Receiver

SC Connector Type

SCOH Central Controller Card

SD Signal Degraded

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface

SEC Synchronous Equipment Clock

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function

SES Severely Errored Second(s)

SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing

SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator

SETS Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"

SF Signal Fail

SF160G Central VC-4 Switch Card

SF2G5 Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SF10G Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SFP Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)

SNCP/I Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring

SNCP/N Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring

SNPA Sub-Network Point of Attachment

SOH Section Overhead

12 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

SPO Spontaneous Alarm

SQM Sequence Mismatch

SSF Server Signal Fail

SSM Synchronization Status Message

SSU Synchronous Source Unit

STM-N Synchronous Transport Module Level N

SUG Supervisory Unequipped Generation

SUM Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring

SW Software

T0 System Clock

T1 Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal

T3 Input for External Clock Reference Signal

T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP Termination Connection Point

TxDeg Transmit Degraded

TED Technical Description

TxFail Transmission Fail

TIF Telemetry Interface

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMP Timestamp

TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

TTP Trail Termination Point

TP Termination Point

TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit

TSD Trail Signal Degrade

TSF Trail Signal Fail

TU Tributary Unit

TUG Tributary Unit Group

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 13
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Tx Transmitter

TXDeg Transmit Degrade Signal

TXFAIL Transmit Failure

UAS Unavailable Second(s)

UAT Unavailable Time

UMN User Manual

UNEQ Unequipped

USI User Interface

UTIF Universal Transmission Internal Interface

VC Virtual Container

VC-n Virtual Container Level n

VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block

VCnTTP VCn Trail Termination Point

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WLS WDM Longspan System

WR Write

WTR Wait to Restore time

14 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2 General

2.1 Network Element Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Network Element...

The window is used to allocate a user defined location name and application type.

Value Ranges:

Name 48 Bytes

Location 64 Bytes

Type

Displays the NE type.

Startup Info

Displays information about the latest NE startup.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 15
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

NE Unique HW Code

Comprising the NE serial number and family code.

Application Type

An application type name can be inserted.

Second Power Supply Monitoring

If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.

PSE Switch For Whole NE

If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an
activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.

Persistency Time

In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.

Raise Time

This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be
reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.

Clear Time

Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The
default clear time is 10 s.

16 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.2 Module View, Single-row Subrack

This window is accessible via the toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> View
-> Module View...

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. It shows the slots and
their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE
only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 17
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The Module View window is divided into two window segments:

Top window segment

Bottom window segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

18 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It contains the physical ports on the current selected card symbol.

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 19
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack

This window is accessible via the toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> View
-> Module View...

20 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. It shows the slots and
their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE
only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

The Module View window is divided into two window segments:

Top window segment

Bottom window segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 21
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It contains the physical ports on the current selected card symbol.

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

22 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.4 Option Settings

This window is accessible via its toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> Options -> Settings...

In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at
startup, the desired time zone and several options for your desktop.

Alarm Severity Threshold

Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the
threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities
below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.

For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is
selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.

By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm
summary.

Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at
application termination.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 23
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Open at Startup

Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.

Time Display

Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on the setting according
to the system time zone of the OS. This assumes that the NE time is set to GMT.

The set time option becomes effective immediately.

General

Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.

Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.

24 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.5 Actual Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Actual Equipping...

This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping
of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure
that the desired information can be found efficiently.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 25
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.6 Script Configuration

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...

This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the
NE.

The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross
connections and SW management.

26 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Top Section

The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:

Symbol Corresponding Menu Description


Item

File -> New File Creates a new empty script


configuration file.

File -> Open... Opens an existing script configuration


file.

File -> Save As... Saves the script configuration file.

Script -> Execute Starts script configuration.

Script -> Stop Stops script configuration.

Script -> Record Automatically creates a script


configuration file.

For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the
Stop symbol.

For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.

Bottom Section

When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors.
To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.

Syntax

• A semicolon follows every statement.

• A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 27
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given
explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.

• The syntax is not case sensitive.

• Script statements:
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters);
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters);
// <Comment> or /* <comment> */

• An object instance is clearly identified by the following values:


ObjectClass
subrackNumber
slotReference
containerIndex
objectIndex

The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4


values enclosed in brackets.

Example:
IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1);
refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.

• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The
keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for
performing a SET invoke is:
objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).

Example:
IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);

• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in
the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke
is:
objectInstance.Action (Parameters);

Example:
EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306),
CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));

• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script
configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or
commands. The syntax for the Wait command is:
Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);

Example: Wait(1000);

• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be
repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of
execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is:
Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user
stop>);
<Qst command 1>;
...
<Qst command n>;
EndLoop;

Examples:
Loop(50);
ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled);

28 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

EndLoop;
Loop(*);
faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11));
EndLoop;

• Syntax for the complex QST types:

SEQUENCE
(element 1, element 2, ... element n)

SEQUENCE OF BYTE
(byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)

Example for ACTION:


ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"),
0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);

SET OF
(element 1, element 2, ..., element n)

CHOICE
<choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>

Example:
vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 29
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2.7 EOW Configurations

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...

Two Wire Handset:

Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.

Four Wire EM Interface:

Allows to connect to a EOW conference.

30 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

3 Extension Shelf

3.1 Extension Shelf Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...

This window allows to configure existing microshelves.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 31
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

3.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using
the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Master System Microshelf

Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.

32 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

3.3 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an LNQ622M symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...

This window shows the Main ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 33
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

3.4 Extension Link Protection Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an LNQ622M symbol with installed link protection -> Subview... -> I-LINK-PROT ->
Configuration...

Working

Displays the working card and port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting card and port

Extension Link Protection Control:

Active Link Section

Displays the active link section.

Operator Command

Allows to select a protection command to be performed.

34 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

3.5 ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an LNQ622M symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

Received ... Connection:

Port

Displays the port.

Identifier

Displays the identifier

Connection Identifier

With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 35
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4 Traffic

4.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
or IFO155M-E symbol in the port list -> Subview...

Context Menu

In the Traffic Flow window, right-click the symbol to open the context menu.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 37
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.2 STM-4 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview...

Context Menu

In the Traffic Flow window, right-click the symbol to open the context menu.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

38 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.3 STM-16 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5,
IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview...

Context Menu

In the Traffic Flow window, right-click the symbol to open the context menu.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 39
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.4 STM-64 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G,
IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol in the port list -> Subview...

Context Menu

In the Traffic Flow window, right-click the symbol to open the context menu.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

40 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.5 ETH Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
symbol in the port list -> Subview...

Context Menu

In the Traffic Flow window, right-click the symbol to open the context menu.

Notes:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 41
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.6 ETH Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration

Supervision

With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

Flow Control

If the flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated if

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured admission control,

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity,

- in case of multi-channel mode the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.

Notes: Incoming pause frames (from ETH side) will be dropped, the NE will not reduce the
speed.

Attention if 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other:
In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will
react to these pause frames. Therefore frames may be lost with high bit rate und different
admission control or VC capacity.

42 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Remote Fault Indication

Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.

Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown.

Port Operation State (only with IFOFE-E card)

Shows the current transfer rate and the auto-negotiation state.

Auto-negotiation (only with IFOFE-E and IFQBE cards)

Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN
equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off
Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".

Input Power Level [dBm] (only with the IFQGBE card)

Displays the current input power level.

Transmit Frequency [THz] (only with the IFQGBE card)

Displays the current transmit frequency.

Receive Frequency [THz] (only with the IFQGBE card)

Displays the current receive frequency.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 43
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.7 GFP Group Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

Note:

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

44 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.8 STM-N Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...

OS tab:

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 45
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

Force Laser Shutdown

The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.

Automatic Laser Shutdown

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When
enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal.
If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one
single fiber), ALS should be enabled.

Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]

Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser
restart period.

Manual Laser Restart

If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.

Laser Data:

Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical
interface.

RS tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.

There are three modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not
equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.

46 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Automatic Link Information

If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which
defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.

Actually Transmitted:

This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.

Transmitted / Expected:

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received:

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

MS tab:

Received Timing Marker

Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide
and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are
treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received
value is the displayed.

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

Overwrite Received SSM

The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock
source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 47
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Force don’t use for Sync

By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as
timing source.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

48 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.9 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFO155M or IFO155M-E protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 49
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.10 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port Provisioning
Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

50 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.11 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 51
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.12 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with prepared Card
Equipment / Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

52 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.13 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M or IFO155M-E symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 53
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.14 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

54 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.15 4F SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5,
IFS2G5B, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M, IFS10G-R or IFQ2G5 symbol in the port list
-> Subview...

This window shows the 4F-SPRING traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 55
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.16 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an optical interface card symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
-> 1+1 MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).

Working

Displays the working port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting port.

MSP Control:

Active Line Section

Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.

56 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed:


Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.

Line Switching Type

Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

Activated or De-activated.

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 57
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.17 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

58 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.18 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 symbol -> Subview... -> 16 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 59
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.19 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G,
IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4
-> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus

60 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.20 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 61
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.21 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with Card Equipment /
Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

62 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.22 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an ETH or
PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 63
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.23 VC4 Selection with LNQ622M or Switch Fabric Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric
or LNQ622M card symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

64 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.24 STM-16 AU4/VC4 4F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol
with installed 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 4F-SPRING -> 32x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus, if any concatenation is created.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 65
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.25 VC4 Multiplex Structure

This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux)
#n symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

66 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.26 E12 Traffic Flow

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol in the port list
-> Subview...

This window shows the E12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 67
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.27 E12 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol in the port list
-> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

P12

AIS Insertion to Port

The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.

68 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

P12 Mapping Supervision

Port Connection Supervision

disabled = no supervision

enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction

The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.

If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and
T4, the signal must be
framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.

CRC-4 Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction.
If the switch is
disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is
only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.

P12 Demapping Processing

Supervision/Retiming

This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled,
the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then
supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised
and is transmitted transparently.
The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset
between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the
SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a
reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.

CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If
the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC
Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination
port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the
termination port monitoring is enabled.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 69
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.28 AU4/VCn Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an
IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n
-> Configuration...

AU4/VCn Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.

If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.

Note: With SF2G5 cards, a maximum number of 32 VC12-Ctp’s, transported within a VC4,
can be transported!

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.

70 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad
Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

VCn Trail Trace tab:

TTI Processing

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

RDI/REI Insertion

By this checkbox, which exists only for a terminated structured VC4, the specific consequent
actions RDI/REI insertion for a failed VC4 can be enabled/disabled.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 71
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.29 VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
or IFQGBE symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x VC4 -> Subview... or VC4 Subview...
-> VC4 #n -> Configuration...

VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcCtp and vcTtp
objects.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

72 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the
user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Number Signal Label

0(00h) unequipped

1(01h) equipped-non-specific

2(02h) TUG structure

3(03h) locked TU

4(04h) asyn. mapping into C3

18(12h) asyn. mapping into C4

19(13h) ATM

20(14h) MAN

21(15h) FDDI

254(efh) Test signal, O.181 specific mapping

255(ffh) VC-AIS

VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 73
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

74 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.30 VC12 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol in the port list
-> Subview... -> VC12 -> Configuration...

VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcCtp and vcTtp
objects.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 75
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Number Signal Label

0(00h) unequipped

1(01h) equipped-non-specific

2(02h) TUG structure

3(03h) locked TU

4(04h) asyn. mapping into C3

18(12h) asyn. mapping into C4

19(13h) ATM

20(14h) MAN

21(15h) FDDI

254(efh) Test signal, O.181 specific mapping

255(ffh) VC-AIS

VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

76 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 77
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.31 VC12-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...
-> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the VC4 #n Mux Structure window -> VC12-2v #n -> Configuration...

VC12-2v Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

78 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.32 VC Group VC3-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by the context menu of an SF2G5 symbol
with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v
-> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.

VC3-2v Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 79
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.33 VC Group Concatenated VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of an
interface or PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 or
n x AU4/VC4 -> (VC4) Subview ... -> VC4-nv or VC4-nc -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.

VC4-4v Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

80 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.34 Port Configuration

This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of a card
symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...

Connector Location Distributor

Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.

Connector Location NE

Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.

Port Operational State

Displays the running operation mode.

Loopback

Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.

Used in Protection

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.

Used as Timing Source

Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 81
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Carries Overhead Connections

Displays the current overhead connections.

82 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.35 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration...
or
by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select
an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration) -> Port Config...

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

Port VLAN ID [1..4094]

Select the required Port VLAN ID number.

Frame Priority [0..7]

Specify the frame priority.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 83
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

CUG Mode Selection

Select the CUG mode:

Single:

The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management
Configuration window.

Multi1:

The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:

Max. Number Of CUGs

Select the max. number of CUGs.

Max. VLAN Range

Select the max. VLAN range.

CUG ID Offset [0..4093]

Select the CUG ID offset.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

Then the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG Management
Configuration window.

Multi2:

The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible
CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

Then the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG Management
Configuration window.

CUG Management

This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

84 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.36 Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections
-> List...

In this window, you can add, delete and display cross connections, and open the following
windows:
Cross Connection Details
Cross Connections Graphic,
GFP Assignment.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Add and Remove Path Protections

How to Configure and Activate Path Protections

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 85
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete a Cross Connection

86 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.37 Add Cross Connection

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connection List button-> Add...
or Cross Connections... -> Graphic... -> Add...

This window allows to select cards, TPs, connection type, connection layer and TP indexes,
and to create a new cross connection.

Propose Connection

Defines the new connection and inserts it into the list.

Connect

Creates the cross connection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 87
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Graphic...

Opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

88 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.38 Cross Connection Details

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connection List button -> (select an
entry) -> Details...

This window shows the created cross connections.

After selecting an entry in the list, you can disconnect that cross connection, configure
protection features, or open the Cross Connections Graphic window.

How to Add and Remove Path Protections

How to Configure and Activate Path Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 89
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.39 Cross Connections Graphic

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...

This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards,
sorted by cross connection protocols.

The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC
column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own
termination points.
The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC
column.

If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.

Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.

90 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Add...

Opens the Add Cross Connection window.

List...

Opens the Cross Connections List window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 91
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

4.40 Overhead Cross Connections

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...

In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.

This window contains two tabs: OH TP List and OH CC List.

OH TP List tab:

The TP List displays all OH termination points in a list control. The list control uses the option
report style for labeling and sorting the list columns. In the list, one list entry (one line)
corresponds to one termination point.

92 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

One termination point entry consists of:

Column Description

OH Termination Point <slot number> <card type>.<port number> (<bit rate>) <OH TP
type> <byte name> (<byte number>)

or

<slot number> <card type>.<port number> <OH TP type>

Connection State Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross


Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.

OH CC Type <type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH TP

Involved As One of: TPA, TPB

Filter:

The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options:

Card
Possible settings:
All; all interface cards of specified type (depends on configuration), SCOH

Port
Possible settings:
All, 1, 2, 3, 4.

OH TP Type
Possible settings:
All; RSOH; MSOH, DCCM, DCCR, HCOC9 Group, HCOC3 Group.

Con. State
Possible Settings:
All; Connected; Free.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 93
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

OH CC List tab:

The list displays all established Cross Connections in a list control. The list control uses the
option report style for labeling and sorting the list columns. In the list one list entry (one line)
corresponds to one Cross Connection.

One Cross Connection entry consists of:

Column Description

CC Type Cross Connection type.

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH CC type

TP A, TP B Termination points

OH CC Options

Action

In this box, you can disconnect a selected OH Cross Connection.

How to Create an OH Cross Connection

How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete OH Cross Connections

94 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5 Protection

5.1 Protection Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
-> Protection...

This window contains all possible and all prepared and created protection groups in the NE,
depending on the currently configured required equipping of the NE. Basically, it provides
create and delete protections of several types.

Column Description

Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active

Type Type of protection switching

Exists either yes or no

Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protect. State State of protection switching

To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 95
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Create

Creates the selected protection in the list.

Delete

Deletes the selected protection in the list.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

96 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.2 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFO155M or IFO155M-E protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 97
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.3 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M or IFO155M-E symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

98 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.4 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M or IFO155M-E symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 99
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.5 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port Provisioning
Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

100 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 101
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 symbol with installed 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection
-> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

102 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with Card Equipment /
Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 103
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Prepared 2F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview...
-> 8 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

104 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Prepared 2F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING
protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 105
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.11 STM-16 AU4/VC4 2F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 symbol with 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview...
-> 16 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

106 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 2F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with 2F-SPRING protection
-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 107
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 4F-SPRING Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with installed 4F SPRING
protection -> Subview ...-> 4F-SPRING -> 128x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus, if any concatenation is created.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

108 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.14 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 109
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.15 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with prepared Card
Equipment / Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

110 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.16 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5, IFS2G5B or IFQ2G5 protection symbol with prepared Card Equipment / Port
Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 111
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.17 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with prepared Card
Equipment / Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

112 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R protection symbol with prepared Card
Equipment / Port Provisioning Configuration -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 113
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.19 2F-SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol
with installed 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).

East / West

Displays the assigned ports.

114 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section

Displays the ring section that is being used

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:


Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 115
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.20 4F SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5,
IFS2G5B, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M, IFS10G-R or IFQ2G5 symbol in the port list
-> Subview...

This window shows the 4F-SPRING traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

116 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.21 4F-SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol
with installed 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 4F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 117
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).

Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East

Displays the assigned ports.

4F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West

Displays the ring section that is being used

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command West / Operator Command East

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:


Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

118 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 119
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.22 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol
with installed 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration...
-> Configure Ring Topology

In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

120 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Number of ring nodes [3..16]

Enter the number of the ring nodes.

In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.

Own Node ID [0..15]

Enter your own node ID.

Ring Map

Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.

2F-SPRING Configuration

4F-SPRING Configuration

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 121
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.23 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol
with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING -> Configuration...
-> Squelch...

Squelch Event Report Control

Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.

Squelch State

Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.

Squelch Table

Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.

122 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.24 Add 1:N MSP

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s or
622-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...

Bitrate

Allows to set the bit rate level.

Protection Port

Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.

Working Ports:

This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the
corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.

The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.

After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.

The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.

The Apply button activates the 1:N MSP protection(s).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 123
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.25 Add Working Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s or
622-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...

After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected
Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.

The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP
window.

124 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.26 Working VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with activated 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
-> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 125
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.27 Working STM-1 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with activated 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
-> (n x) STM-1 -> Subview...

This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.

126 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.28 RPR Feeder Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> LP #n -> Performance -> RPR Feeder...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 127
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Broadcast Frames Rx Number of received broadcast frames.

Broadcast Frames Tx Number of transmitted broadcast frames.

Multicast Frames Rx Number of received multicast frames.

Multicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted multicast frames.

Unicast Frames Rx Number of received unicast frames.

Unicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted unicast frames.

Lost Frames Ingress Stream Number of receiving overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Rx

Lost Frames Egress Stream Number of transmitting overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Tx

Lost Frames Ingress Best Effort Number of receiving overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Rx

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Total Throughput Rx [bytes] Total number of received bytes.

Total Throughput Tx [bytes] Total number of transmitted bytes.

Average Throughput Rx Average number of received bytes per second..


[bytes/s]

Average Throughput Tx [byte/s] Average number of transmitted bytes per second.

128 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 129
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.29 RPR Ring Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR 3 o’clock or 9 o’clock -> Performance
-> RPR Ring...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

130 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Stream Frames Rx Number of received stream frames.

Best Effort Frames Rx Number of received best effort frames.

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Throughput Stream Throughput of received stream frames.


Frames Rx

Throughput Best Effort Throughput of received best effort frames.


Frames Rx

Layer Threshold

VC4 30% (2400 BBE/s)

STM-4 RS-Layer 50% (4000 BBE/s)

STM-4 MS-Layer 30% (9600 BBE/s or 2400 BBE/s for each channel)

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 131
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

132 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.30 RPR Switch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...

This window contains five tabs.

L2 Switch tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RPR Node ID [0..63]

Enter the RPR node ID.

Protection Wait to Restore Time [1s..300s]

Enter the Wait to Restore Time.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 133
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Protection Hold Off Time [0..2000 x 10ms]

Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.

Permanent MACs tab:

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

In the table, you can add a new, or delete an existing list entry.

Learned MACs tab:

Life Time Value

Enter the life time value or disable the life time restriction.

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

Select CUG ID

Select the CUG ID, or request the learned MAC entries.

The table shows the permanent MACs. You can delete an existing list entry.

Topology tab:

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

Ring Not Closed

Informs you about the ring configuration.

The table shows the learned MACs.

Card Release tab:

Card Release Switch

Values: Cleared, Forced Switch, Lockout.

Card Release State

Shows the current card state.

134 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

How to Configure RPR Protection

Copy to Permanent MACs

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 135
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.31 Copy to Permanent MACs

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... -> Learned MACs tab
-> Copy to Permanent button

This window shows the progress bar, symbolizing the copying process from the Learned
MACs list to the Permanent MACs list.

136 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.32 Adding a Permanent Entry

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...-> Add...

CUG ID [0..4095]

Allows to select the CUG ID.

Port ID [1..4]

Allows to select the Port ID.

Node ID [0..63]

Allows to select the Node ID.

MAC Address

Allows to enter the unique MAC address.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 137
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.33 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an LNQ622M symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...

This window shows the Main ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

138 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.34 Extension Link Protection Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an LNQ622M symbol with installed link protection -> Subview... -> I-LINK-PROT
-> Configuration...

Working

Displays the working card and port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting card and port

Extension Link Protection Control:

Active Link Section

Displays the active link section.

Operator Command

Allows to select a protection command to be performed.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 139
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.35 Add Extension Link Protection View

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s or
622-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...

Main Shelf:

Working Port

Allows to select the working port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Protecting Port

Allows to select the protecting port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Extension Shelf:

SUBRACK

Allows to select the subrack.

140 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Working Port

Displays the working port.

Protecting Port

Displays the protecting port.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 141
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.36 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context
menu.

142 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.37 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 143
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.38 1:N MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
-> 1:N MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays 1:N line architecture.

Protecting

Displays the protection card and port.

144 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Working:

The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.

The Extend... button opens the 1:N Extension window.

The Reduce button removes the port from the list.

MSP Control:

Switching State

Displays the switching state.

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed:


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this list, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.

Operator Command Port

Displays the operator command port.

Line Switching Type

Displays the line switching type.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]

Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.

MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 145
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

5.39 1:N MSP Extension

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
or 622-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
-> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...

Worker Section Number

Displays the worker section number.

Worker Priority

Allows to configure the worker priority.

Additional Working Port


Allows to configure an additional working port.

146 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6 Cards

6.1 Card Equipment Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by selecting an interface card via the context
menu of the slot number.

This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or
protections if available) for the particular interface card --- separately for each port if
applicable.

If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly.
When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will
automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 147
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.2 Possible Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Possible Equipping...

This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about with which
slots cards can be equipped. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a tree
control to ensure that the desired information can be found efficiently.

Information to detail the properties and behavior of the card to match the specification of the
slot:, e.g.:

Slot

=> Possible Card


Type

=> Provisioning
Modes

=> Working

=> Partner Slot

148 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.3 Port Provisioning Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.

In case of an optical interface card:


Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 149
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.4 SCOH Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

Enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Carries Overhead Connections

Displays the current connections.

EOW Active

Checkbox for enabling or disabling the EOW function.

150 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.5 Card Configuration for SDH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SDH card
symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current group of ISTM signals

Displays the current group.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 151
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.6 Card Configuration for ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an ETH card
symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current group of ISTM signals

Displays the current group.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

152 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.7 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration

These windows are accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current group of ISTM signals

Displays the current group.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 153
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Note:

The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.

The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.

154 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.8 SF160G Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF160G
symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

ISTM signals

Displays the slot number and the selected ISTM.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 155
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the IFS40G-MX
symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Connection 40G Reference:

Type of Connection Reference

Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS,
IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R cards.

Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.

External: Interconnection to another NE.

Connection Reference

In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or


IFS10G-R cards must be configured correctly.

156 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.10 IF2M Card Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the Module View, by using the context menu of a IF2M symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current group of UTIF signals

Displays the utif_X or utif_Y signal.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Monitored channel NE [1...63]

In the Channel Switched to Monitor Port list, one of the 63 channels of the card can be
switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out simultaneously).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 157
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Used in Protection

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.

158 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.11 CLU Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a CLU symbol
-> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Actual Clock Master

Displays the actual clock master.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 159
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.12 SCOH Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

160 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.13 Card Label Information for 1-Port Interfaces

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol with 1 interface per card -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 161
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.14 Card Label Information for 4-Port Interfaces

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol with 4 interfaces per card -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

162 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.15 Card Label Information for 8-Port Interfaces

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol with 8 interfaces per card -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 163
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.16 Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card
-> symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

164 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

6.17 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an IFS40G-MX
symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 165
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7 Data

7.1 TIF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> TIF...

In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input contact
states for alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.

How to Configure TIF Ports

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 167
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.2 Subrack Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack
symbol -> Configuration...

This window contains two tabs labeled Customer Specific and Vendor Specific.

Customer Specific tab:

The Customer Specific tab contains the customer specific inventory data of the Subrack. Here
you can define your own data about the NE. Value range: 0...128 characters

Vendor Specific tab:

The Vendor Specific tab contains the vendor specific inventory data of the Subrack. It is
written by the manufacturer. By the OS/LCT, it can only be read. Value range: 0...256
characters.

168 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.3 Card Inventory Summary

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...

This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all
configured cards:
ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 169
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.4 Copy Data

This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of a symbol in
the port list -> Subview... -> Copy Data

With this window, you can transfer alarms and configured data of a AU4 or VCn to one or
more other of the same type, either from one card to another or object configurations within
the same card

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

170 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Copy Items

Here you can select the source items:

Alarm configurations

Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)

Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)

Copy Units

Source: This field shows the source to be copied.

Targets: Here, the targets are selected. At least one target must be selected.

Copy Card Data

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 171
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.5 Copy Card Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a suitable card
symbol -> Copy Card Data...

With this window, you can transfer configured data of a card to one or more other empty
equivalent slots.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

Copy Units

Source: This field shows the source to be copied.

Targets: Here, the targets are selected. At least one target must be selected.

Copy Data

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

172 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.6 Log Records Attribute

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object)
-> Show Details...

This window displays details of the selected object.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 173
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.7 DB Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management...

In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.

The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in
a non-volatile memory.

You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You
can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a
card/software change or failure.

NE State

The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.

Active Config DB:

Configuration ID

Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.

174 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Config DB Action

Possible Settings:

NE State Config DB Action

Active no

Idle no

Set to Default Config DB

Set to Previous Config DB

How to Download VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 175
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.8 DB Upload Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name)
-> Save.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.

By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.

Note:

In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

How to Upload VCDB Files

176 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.9 DB Download Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened
window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.

How to Download VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 177
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.10 ASIC Data Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
-> Information -> ASIC Data...

This window gives information about the ASICs used of the selected card with the designation
of the ASIC function, of the number of the ASIC function on the card and the appropriate
inventory data. The information is displayed in a list control.

178 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7.11 NE Logs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Logs... -> NE Logs...

Configuration Log tab:

The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single configuration change.

One configuration log entry consists of:

Column Label Description

Object Object name

Location Location name

Event Event name

Time Date-time stamp

Click the column header to sort the column.

Historical Event Log tab:

The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical
event log.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 179
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

One historical event log entry consists of:

Column Label Description

Object Object name

Location Location name

Alarm/TCA Alarm name

Event Event name

Time Date-time stamp

Click the column header to sort the column.

The list items can be sorted relating to each column in the following way:

Column Sorted by

Object Event entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order (entries of
one object are sorted by location, alarm/TCA, event, time).

Location Alarm entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order (entries
of one location are sorted by object, alarm/TCA, event, time).

Alarm / TCA Alarm entries are alphabetically sorted by alarm/TCA in ascending order
(entries of one alarm/TCA are sorted by object, location, event, time).

Event Event entries are alphabetically sorted to raised and cleared (entries of one
event are sorted by object, location, alarm/TCA, time).

Time The most recent event entry is written on the top (entries of one time are sorted
by object, location, alarm/TCA, event).

Sorting by time is the selected default option.

Displaying the Mux-structure is not possible.

The NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar or via the File -> Save as...
command in the Main Menu.

180 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8 Performance

8.1 MSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
or IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-1 or STM-4 -> Performance
-> MS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 181
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

182 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 183
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

184 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.2 MSTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
or IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-1 or STM-4 -> Performance
-> MS Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 185
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

186 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 187
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

188 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.3 RSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
or IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-4 -> Performance -> RS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 189
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

190 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 191
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

192 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...

This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 193
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.5 MCF CLNS Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...

This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.

194 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.

IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised In operation

Cleared No overload

IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised In operation

Cleared No overload

Assembling Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.

Congestion Discards

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.

Error Reports Received

Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.

Area Addresses Ignored

Displays the number of the manual area addresses assigned to this NE, which are ignored
because the maximum number of area addresses is reached.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 195
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

Other PDUs Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.

Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.

Segments Received

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.

Segments Sent

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.

Upload Dump DB...

Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.

Upload Config Parameters...

Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the


ConfigParameters.log file.

196 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.6 MCF DCC Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a
channel in the list) -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Address Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Area Mismatch

If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a


common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 197
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

198 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.7 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Addresses Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 199
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

200 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.8 Ethernet Packet Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 201
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval

Current 15min Corresponding entries

Current 24h Corresponding entries

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals
are also contained in the list.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

202 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.9 TCA List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> Performance
-> TCA List...

Current Tab:

The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is
displayed.

One TCA entry consists of:

Column Description

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>)

TCA TCA name

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 203
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

History Tab:

The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as
long as the LCT is online.

The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA

Raised,

Cleared::

TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.

The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This
time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request
initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.

The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the
Registry).

The concatenation of location name in both TCA lists must result in the corresponding name
of the Performance window, where this TCA can be found.

Sorting (mouse-click on the column header)

The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.

Column sorted by

Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one
object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)

Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of
one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)

TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one
alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)

Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by
object, location, TCA, time.)

Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by
object, location, TCA, event.)

Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.

204 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.10 AU4 PJE Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n
-> Performance -> AU4 PJE...

This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h
performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 205
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Current

The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval

Time Time of the current interval

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

-PJE The negative pointer actions are counted

+PJE The positive pointer actions are counted

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The
last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The
last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min
intervals are also contained in the list.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

206 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.11 VC12 Near End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol
-> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> VC12 Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 207
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC12 30% (600 BBE/s)

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

208 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 209
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

210 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.12 VC12 Far End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol
-> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> VC12 Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 211
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC12 30% (600 BBE/s)

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

212 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 213
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

214 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.13 VCCTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a card
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n
-> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 215
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

216 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 217
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

218 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.14 VCCTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a card
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n
-> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 219
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

220 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 221
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

222 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.15 VCTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol)
-> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 223
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

224 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 225
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

226 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.16 VCTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol)
-> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 227
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

228 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the threshold value (TCA) is exceeded, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and
Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 229
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

230 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

8.17 STM-64 Gauge Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64
-> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 231
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

Enable TCA Monitoring

The precondition for TCA processing is SET

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Avg. BER Average BER of the current interval

Max. BER Maximal BER within the current interval

Available Time Time within the current interval

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower
threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower threshold and no UAS occurs. The ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table
below.

232 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed. The
ranges for these thresholds are shown in the table below.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 233
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9 MCF

9.1 Message Communication Functions

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...

This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message
communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.

Context Menu:

In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 235
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.2 MCF Transport Connection Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...

In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.

Remote NSAP Address

Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.

Remote T Selector

T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.

Local T Selector

T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.

Connection Type

Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming
= sent from the remote system).

Window Timer [5..1009]

The window timer is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on the transport
connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This parameter
also controls the inactivity timer.

236 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]

Displays the time after the data packet (Acknowledge) is repeated if there is no answer from
the opposite station.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 237
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.3 MCF Transport Connection Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...

This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.

238 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.4 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...

This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.

Destination Areas

Address Prefix
displays the address part of the destination area.

Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number


contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 239
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Destination Systems

NSAP Address
displays the NSAP of the destination system.

Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number


contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

Adjacencies
displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.

Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency)


displays the internal ID number of the linkage.

Adjacency ID
displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.

Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency)


displays the MAC address of the neighbour.

Neighbour System Type


displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.

Neighbour System IDs

Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.

240 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.5 MCF CLNS Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...

This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 241
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.

IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised In operation

Cleared No overload

IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised In operation

Cleared No overload

Assembling Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.

Congestion Discards

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.

Error Reports Received

Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.

Area Addresses Ignored

Displays the number of the manual area addresses assigned to this NE, which are ignored
because the maximum number of area addresses is reached.

242 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

Other PDUs Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.

Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.

Segments Received

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.

Segments Sent

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.

Upload Dump DB...

Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.

Upload Config Parameters...

Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the


ConfigParameters.log file.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 243
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.6 MCF DCC Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...

In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4
ports.

DCC List

The list contains 4 DCC channels and displays its connection state.

Display Meaning

DCC Channel DCC channel name

DCCM/DCCR Port <DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>

Connection State Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free

Linkage State Possible values: Enabled / Disabled

244 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

New DCC Cross Connection

Set the type of DCC connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.

How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 245
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.7 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a
channel in the list) -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

The NEs (Level 2) of another range can be entered.

Click Delete to clear existing addresses.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: Yes or No

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. RAPs are strongly necessary, otherwise there is no
communication to other NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).

Level 1 Default Metric

Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

246 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Level 2 Default Metric

Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

T200 Time [200...2500 ms]

Value range: 200...2500 ms

Interface Type

Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE
must be set on Network and the other one to User.

Line Code

Displays the NRZ line code.

MCF Linkage State

Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).

Note:

In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 247
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.8 MCF DCC Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a
channel in the list) -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Address Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Area Mismatch

If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a


common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.

248 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 249
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.9 Adding a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a
channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the the SNPA address given as an additional information by the
operator.

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

250 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 251
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.10 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a
channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

252 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.11 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).

Click Delete to clear existing addresses.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: No or Yes

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. RAPs are strongly necessary, otherwise there is no
communication to other NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).

L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]

Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 253
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Level 1 Default Metric

Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

Level 2 Default Metric

Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

MAC Ethernet Address

This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.

Note:

This address is worldwide unique.

Reachable Address List Supervision

enabled: Reachable Address Prefix is monitored. In the MCF Ethernet Reachable Address
Modify window, the Reachable Address State field is active.

The Link is enabled.

disabled: Reachable Address Prefix is not monitored. In the MCF Ethernet Reachable
Address Modify window, the Reachable Address State field is not active.

The Link is disabled.

MCF Linkage State

Linkage state is displayed.

254 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.12 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Addresses Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 255
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

256 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.13 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu
of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 257
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.14 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...

Notes:

When stack parameters are changed, the stack has to be stopped and started manually.

An active proxy server needs that handling as well.

Layer 4 (Transport):

Window Timer [5..1009]

If there is no data packet (Acknowledge) coming from the opposite station till the window
timer is over, Layer 4 quits the connection.

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]

Displays the time after the data packet (Acknowledge) is repeated if there is no answer from
the opposite station.

258 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Layer 3 (NSAP):

Area Address

The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is
mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the
length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN
planning.

Note:

The NSAP address has to be unique.

System ID

The System ID is 6 Bytes long.

Note:

The MAC address of the NE has to be identical to the System ID.

NSAP Selector [1.255]

The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.

Note:

Take care, that you have put "0" in front of the NSAP Selector, when you type in the NSAP
address in the DCN Settings of TNMS CT/ TNMS Core!

Layer 3 (CLNS):

CLNS Maximum Lifetime [1..255]

Displays, how many steps may be made between System-to-System to deliver a message
before it expires.

Default: 255

Routing Principle

Displays the range within which the system has to report.

Level 1 IS = to all systems within the same area.

Level 2 IS = to systems in different areas.

Note:

The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be


followed by a loss of connection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 259
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Value Ranges:

Window Timer 5..1009

Maximum No. of Transmissions 3...16

Retransmission Time 250...64000 ms

Area Address 3...13 Bytes

System ID 1...6 Bytes

NSAP Selector 1...255

CLNS Maximum Lifetime 1...255

How to Configure NSAP Settings

260 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

9.15 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu
of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 261
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry.

262 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10 Timing

10.1 Date / Time Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> NE Time...

This window is used to configure the NE time according to the GMT. Opening this window
causes a request of date and time from the NE. The received values are displayed in the
current NE time field and are automatically updated each second due to the PC internal clock
source.

Current NE Time

This field allows you to select the basis the NE time will be configured to. The current NE time
can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the MS Windows control
panel.

Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT

The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time
settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 263
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10.2 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC...

In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each
timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing
always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is
used for the timing derivation.

A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a
timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization
reference.
You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3
timing source.

264 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of
an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For
further information, see below ("Forced").

The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4.
The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.

The modes involved are as follows:

Auto:
The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the
best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6
= very bad/do not use).

Forced:
You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second
arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the timing
selected timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears
after expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning.
The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately.
The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry
of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.

If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no


longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.

If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the
Free Running mode.

Use SSM for Selection checkbox


With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the
Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).

The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received
STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are
used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the
DNU display, the received value is the displayed.

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 265
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

How to Configure the Timing

How to Set Sync Priorities

266 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10.3 T0 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...

Timing Source in Use for T0

Displays the current T0 timing source.

Requested Timing Source for T0

The T0 clock pulse can permanently be derived from

one of the T3 clock pulses (external),

T1 clock pulses (if SDH signal is used as timing reference),

configuration without reference timing (free Running).

- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.

How to Configure the Timing

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 267
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10.4 T1 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...

Timing References Tab

Displays the T1 timing references and the dedicated Synchronous Status Message (SSMs)
information.

WTR Tab

Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.

How to Configure the Timing

268 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10.5 T3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T3 -> Configuration...

T3 SSMs

You can set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a Timing Marker.
This is necessary, because T3 as 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM.
The Timing Marker, which has been set as a HEX value, is displayed in front of the context
menu field.

T3 Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.

T3 Received SSMs

Displays the received quality level information.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 269
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Quality levels:

SSM (hex) Display Quality level

2 PRC Q1

4 SSU-T Q2

8 SSU-L Q3

B SEC Q4

0 quality unknown Q5

F DNU (don’t use) Q6

Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2)

Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.

How to Configure the Timing

270 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

10.6 T4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T4 -> Configuration...

Timing Source in Use for T4

Displays the current T4 timing source.


In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase
quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).

Requested Timing Source for T4

- Clear enables an auto revertive selecting function.


- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
- Off disconnects the T4 output.

T4 Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.

How to Configure the Timing

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 271
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

11 Alarms

11.1 Alarm List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> Fault -> Alarm List...

The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.

The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list control containing
alarm entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list control uses the
option report style for labeling and sorting the list columns.

In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.

Current tab:

The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state
(acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes
(show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 273
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel


number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

State Either unacknowledged or acknowledged

Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue
outline.

Context Menu

Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the
selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm
acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is
changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.

Show alarms with severity

You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.

Show alarms with state

You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.

Alarm Counter

Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.

History tab:

The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is
online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one
particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm

raised

274 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

cleared (= no alarm)

The VC alarms are reported by the IPU. The assignment IPU-channel/Interface card take
place by a list.

The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.

Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.

One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Location <slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

Event raised, cleared

Time Time and date of alarm.

Show alarms with severity

The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.

Click Clear History to clear the entire list.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 275
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

11.2 Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...
or
via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol in the
port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all alarm information concerning this object/container in
detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

276 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

Notes:

LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E
card and is not assigned to any port.

VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC
is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.

How to Suppress Alarms

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 277
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

11.3 Communication Alarm Feature Table


IMPORTANT!

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator
Guidelines).

Communication Alarms

Object Alarm Severity Description Remedial Action

ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination

ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client

ETH OPT TTP TxDeg Major Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned
SFP soon.

ETH OPT TTP TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned
SFP.

ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination

ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client

GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic

3/9 o´ Clock LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
serving the ring traffic
interfaces of RPR

MS AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.


Signal

278 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

MS SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

MS SSF Minor Server Signal Fail Check the concerned


configuration settings.

MS RDI Warning Remote Defect Check the output signal of


Indicator the card, which may have
prompted the RDI alarm. If
it is correct, the concerned
card must be replaced.

AU4 LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T0 is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LOM T3 Minor Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of


#1,#2 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LT4 Minor Loss of T4 Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T4 is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC LTS T1 #1.. Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
#8 T1 #1.. #8 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
T3 #1, #2 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

OS, LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of


OS-CO, the concerned card. If it is
OS-PA correct, the card must be
replaced.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 279
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

OS, TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned


OS-CO, SFP.
OS-PA

OS, TxDeg Minor Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned


OS-CO, SFP soon.
OS-PA

RPR Switch RPR 3o´ Minor Link failure at 3 o' Fault not in the home
Clock Span clock span device.
Fail

RPR Switch RPR 9o´ Minor Link failure at 9 o' Fault not in the home
Clock Span clock span device.
Fail

RPR Switch FOT Major Fail of topology Fault not in the home
device.

RPR-LOG- FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
PORT remote Ethernet device.
termination

RS TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

RS LOF Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

RS LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

TU LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

280 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

E12 LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.
Signal

P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If the alarm
persists, replace the card.

P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If still an EXC alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still an SD alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 281
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

VC12 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC12 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC12 Fault not in home device.

VC12 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC3 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC3 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC3 Fault not in home device.

VC3 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

282 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

11.4 NEAP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> NEAP...

The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and
allows to configure the alarm severities.

Column Description

Alarm Type Communication or Equipment

Location Logical correlation or signal type

Alarm Name Alarm designation

Object Involved path or unit

Severity Major, Minor, or No

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 283
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12 Enhanced Traffic Configurations

12.1 Concatenation Group Templates

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an Ethernet or
packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...

This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.

GFP Assignment

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 285
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.2 Modify Template

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an IFOFE-E,
IFQGBE or IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Modify Template...

This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.


With an IFOFE-E card, n = 1...6.
With an IFQGBE or IFQGBE-E card, n = 1...8.

Note:

Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.

Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.

286 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.3 Concatenation Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an Ethernet or
packet switch card or LO switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
or via the port list of a selected SDH card, by using the context menu of a SDH port symbol
-> Configuration -> Concatenation...

This window allows you to configure concatenation groups.

Note:

With the IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, and IFQGBE-E cards, the user must select a template (see
below).

With the IFOFES-E card, there are no templates. The user must configure the multiplex
structure first (via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card.

A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same TUG-3.

With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.

The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection
window.

The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured
VC4-nv groups.

The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 287
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The following templates are available:

For the PF2G5 card:

Template 1 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 2 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-4v)

Template 3 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 1xVC4-2v)

Template 4 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 3xVC4, 1xVC4-4v)

For the IFOFE-E card:

Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)

Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-4v)

Template 7 (6xVC3, 6xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 9 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 4xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)

For the IFQGBE card and the IFQGBE-E card:

Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)

Template 12 (2xVC4, 4xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

Template 13 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 6xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

Template 14 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 3xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

288 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.4 Add Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 or
SF10G card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...

Concatenation Type

Select the required type from the list.

Group ID

Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.

Available TPs / Selected TPs

Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 289
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.5 VC4-2v Virtual AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with VC4-nv concatenation
activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

290 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.6 VC4-16v Virtual AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with VC4-16v concatenation
activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 291
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.7 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS, IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R symbol with according concatenation
activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

292 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.8 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v
-> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 293
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.9 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQGBE or PF2G5 symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...
-> n x VC4 -> [VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

294 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.10 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4
-> VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 295
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.11 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation
Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply.
Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v
-> Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...
or
via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFQGBE or a PF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> 16 x VC4 -> Subview ... -> VC4-4v
-> Subview... -> Virtual VC4 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC4 Misc tab:

RDI/REI Insertion (if available)

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcCtp and vcTtp
objects.

Supervision (if available)

Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

296 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Virtual VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 297
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.12 Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v
-> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC3 Misc tab:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

298 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Virtual VC3 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC4/VC3 Configuration

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 299
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.13 Virtual VC4/VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQGBE or a PF2G5 symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> 16 x VC4
-> Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview... -> Virtual VC4 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC4 Misc tab:

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcCtp and vcTtp
objects.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

300 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Virtual VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 301
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.14 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 or
SF10G symbol with activated VC12-nv concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n
-> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

302 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.15 Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...
-> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the VC4 #n Mux Structure window -> VC12-2v #n -> Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n
-> Configuration...

Virtual VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 303
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

304 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.16 Neighbour Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 305
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.17 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an IFQGBE-E,
IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

Note:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.

ETH-GFP Assignment

Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.

The value range depends on the port type:

Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX: 1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX: 1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX: 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Notes:

The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.

All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

306 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

Port Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

PF2G5 GFP Assignment

IFOFES-E GFP Assignment

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 307
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.18 GFP Group Subview

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an Ethernet or
packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...

This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.

308 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.19 GFP Group Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

Note:

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 309
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.20 PF2G5 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

LP Bandwidth Configuration

Enter the Ingress Bandwidth and Egress Bandwidth for each LP port.

Value range: 1...450 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Assign the VC or VC group to each GFP group and enable/disable supervision.

RPR-SDH Assignment

Select Quad or Single SDH Capacity and assign the VC or VC group to the RPR.

Port Config...

Opens the PF2G5 Config window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Selection window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

310 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

How to Create / Delete VC Channels

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 311
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.21 IFOFES-E GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E
card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

Notes:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.

VCs or virtual concatenated VCs of the first VC4 can only be assigned to ports 1...4.
VCs or virtual concatenated VCs of the second VC4 can only be assigned to ports 5...8.

In case of virtual concatenated VCs, at first the Mux structure must be configured via the VC4
Multiplex Structure window. Then the virtual concatenated VCs have to be generated in the
Concatenation Configuration window.

There is no admission control, because the required transmission capacity can be configured
with virtual concatenated VC12s in VC12 granularity (2-Mbit/s steps).

There is no sub-channeling, i.e. every GFP group can transmit only one port.

Not assigned but cross connected VCs will cause LofDel alarm at the other end of the VC
path; the IFOFES-E card will not insert Idle GFP frames.

312 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First,.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

Port Config...

Opens the ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 313
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.22 PF2G5 GFP Port Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config...

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

Port VLAN ID [1..4094]

Select the required Port VLAN ID number.

Frame Priority [0..7]

Specify the frame priority.

314 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

CUG Mode Selection

Select the CUG mode:

Single:

The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management
Configuration window.

Multi1:

The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:

Max. Number Of CUGs

Select the max. number of CUGs.

Max. VLAN Range

Select the max. VLAN range.

CUG ID Offset [0..4093]

Select the CUG ID offset.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

Then the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG Management
Configuration window.

Multi2:

The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible
CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

Then the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG Management
Configuration window.

CUG Management

This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 315
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.23 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration -> Port Config... (select Single CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

CUG ID [0..4045]

Select the CUG ID.

Service Class

Select the Select Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

VLAN Mode

Select the VLAN mode.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

316 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.24 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi1 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

The table allows to enter the Multi1 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 317
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.25 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

Tunnel Tag Prot ID

Enter the Tunnel Tag Prot ID

The table allows to enter the Multi2 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

318 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

12.26 PF2G5 Add CUG

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management
-> Add CUG

CUG ID [0..4045]

Select the CUG ID.

Tunneling Mode

Activate / Deactivate the tunneling mode.

Service Class

Select the Select Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 319
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13 TCP/IP Configurations

13.1 IP Addresses Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...

This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the
SURPASS hiT 7070.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 321
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of the interface.

This index must be used also for identification of unnumbered links in


OSPF configuration.

(Identifier = SNMP-index)

Interface Interface name.

Possible Interface names are :

eth0:
for Ethernet Interface
(unnumbered index 2)

lo:0:
for Local loopback interface
(unnumbered index 1)

dcc:
Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR. Each device could be
configured as numbered or unnumbered interface

IP Address The local IP address of the interface.

The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in this case the interface is
not configured.

Once a local loopback address has been defined in the SURPASS hiT
7070, it is not possible any more to reset a configured IP address back
to 0.0.0.0. If the address 0.0.0.0 is assigned, the NE assigns the
address of lo:0 to this device. If the IP address of an interface is equal to
the address of the local loopback interface lo:0 this interface is treated
as unnumbered interface. If the IP address is not equal to the address of
lo:0 or to the address of any other interface this interface is called a
numbered interface. Every time that the operator tries to disable an IP
interface by configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local loopback IP
address will be set.

+ to disable IP on the interface set this interface to OSI only, using the
"Linkage Config" window.

For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF ->
Ethernet -> Configuration, then select OSI.

For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> DCC,
then select a DCC interface and press the right-hand-mouse button,
select "Configuration", then select OSI.

Subnet Mask Subnet mask associated with the IP address of this interface.

It defines the network that this interface belongs to. If OSPF is enabled
on this interface the subnet mask has to be the same as set for the
connected peer interface(s).

322 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Dest IP Address The destination IP address of the interface referenced by the Index.

For the Ethernet interface the destination has to be the same as the
source. For point to point links normally it is not necessary to enter any
data in this field.

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 323
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.

For more detailed information see IP Address Table.

324 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.3 IP Static Routing Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...

This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to
configure static routes manually.

Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following
information is shown:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 325
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Column Description

Destination Destination IP address of this route.

Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.7.0 are reserved for


internal purposes and should never be entered in this table.

Interface Name of the local interface through which the next hop of this route
should be reached.

Metric [0..32766] Primary routing metric for this route.

Next Hop IP address of the next hop of this route.

Type Type of the route:

Direct
The destination IP address is directly connected to the SURPASS hiT
7070 via the interface named in the "interface" column.

Indirect
The destination IP address is reachable via the Next Hop IP address.

Invalid
removes the route from the active routing process.

Protocol Routing mechanism via which this route was learned.

Mask Mask to be logically AND-ed with the destination address, before being
compared to the value in the Destination field.

Add...

Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify
window.

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.

326 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 327
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.

328 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.6 OSPF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...

This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).

OSPF Router ID

Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is
the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.

Enabled OSPF

The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.

Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at
least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.

Autonomous System Border Router

Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs
propagate default routes only when these are entered.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 329
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Area Border Router

Indication whether this router is an area border router.

Information Fields:

External Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently
stored in the link-state database.

Originated New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.

Received New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new


instantiations.

External LSA Checksum Summary

Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.

330 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.7 OSPF Areas Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.

Column Description

Area Unique identifier of an area.

LSA Import Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State


Advertisements). Used to configure stub
areas.

SPF Runs The number of times that the intra-area route


table has been calculated using this area's
link state database.

Link State This is an information field: displays the


Advertisement (LSA) number of Link State Advertisements.

LSA Checksum This is an information field: displays the sum


Summary of the LSA link-state checksums contained in
the link-state database of this area.

Area Summary Control of the import of summary LSAs into


stub areas.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 331
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.

Note:

No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.

332 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.8 OSPF Areas Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 333
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.9 OSPF Area Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.

334 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.10 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .

Column Description

Area Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be


found.

LSDB Type Type of the Area Aggregate.

Net Address The IP address of the network or sub-network


indicated by the range.

Net Mask The sub-network mask that pertains to the


network or sub-network.

Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges


either trigger the advertisement of the
indicated aggregate (advertise matching),
or result in the sub-network not being
advertised at all outside the area.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 335
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Add...

Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:

Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.

336 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.11 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates...
-> Add..

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 337
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.12 OSPF Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of this interface.


This is the index defined in the IP Address
Table.

IP Address IP address of this interface.

State OSPF interface state: possible types are

For Ethernet Interface:


Designated Router,
Backup Designated Router
Other Designated Router

For DCC Interfaces,


Point to Point (PtP)

Events Number of times this OSPF interface has


changed its state, or an error has occurred.

338 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Administrative State Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled /


Disabled).

Area Unique identifier of the area to which the


interface connects.

Type OSPF interface type:

Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces).


Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)

The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in


this table.

Designated Router IP address of the designated router in the


LAN, if applicable.

Backup Designated IP address of the backup designated router in


Router the LAN, if applicable.

Router Priority [0..255] Priority of this interface for becoming


Designated Router.
Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming
Designated Router.

Transit Delay [0..3600 Estimated number of seconds to transmit a


s] link-state update packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state


[0..3600 s] advertisement retransmissions, for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 Number of seconds between the Hello


s] packets that the router sends on the interface.

Timeout [1..65535 s] Timeout interval.

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:

No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 339
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.13 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.

Notes:

To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP
Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP
Address field is grayed out.

The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if
OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be
configured to the default values:

340 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Area Backbone Area

Router Priority 1

Transit Delay 1

Retransmission Interval 5

Hello Interval 10

Timeout 40

Password none

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 341
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.14 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.

Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this


entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).

Metric Value [0..65535] Metric on this interface.

342 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.15 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.

Column Description

Area Transit area that the Virtual Link


traverses.

Virtual Neighbour Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.

State OSPF virtual interface state.

Events Number of state changes or error events


on this Virtual Link.

Transit Delay [0..3600 s] Estimated number of seconds it takes to


transmit a link-state update packet over
this interface.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 343
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state


[0..3600 s] advertisement retransmissions, for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 s] Number of seconds between the Hello


packets that the router sends on the
interface.

Timeout Timeout interval. This timeout interval has


[1.. 2147483647 s] to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.


Note:

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

344 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.16 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces...
-> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 345
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.17 OSPF Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this neighbour.

Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.

On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding


value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.

Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the


Autonomous System.

LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour


(OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this


Routing neighbour (OFF/ON).

Neighbour Priority Priority of this neighbour in the designated


[0..255] router selection algorithm.

346 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

State State of the relationship with this neighbour.

Events Number of times this neighbour relationship


has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Current length of the retransmission queue.


Length

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 347
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.18 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.

Column Description

Area Transit area identifier.

IP Address IP address of this virtual neighbour.

Virtual Neighbour Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour


Router ID router.

LSA Import LSA import state with this virtual neighbour


(OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual


Routing neighbour (OFF/ON).

348 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

State State of the relationship with this virtual


neighbour.

Events Number of times this virtual neighbour


relationship has changed state, or an error
has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Current length of the retransmission queue.


Length

Hello Suppressed Indicator whether Hellos are being


suppressed to the neighbour.

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 349
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.19 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours...
-> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.

Notes:

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is
40 s, so it has to be changed manually.

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.

350 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.20 OSPF LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...

This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.

Column Description

Area Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was


received.

Type Type of the Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating router in the


Autonomous System.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the link state advertisement in


seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the


advertisement, excepting the age field.

Link State Number of Link State Advertisements.


Advertisement (LSA)

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 351
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.

352 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.21 OSPF LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 353
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.22 OSPF External LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...

This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.

Column Description

Type Type of the external Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

Ext LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating external


router.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the external link state advertisement in


seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the


advertisement, excepting the Age field.

Ext Link State Number of external Link State


Advertisement Advertisements.

354 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 355
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.23 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
-> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.

356 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.24 TCP Connections Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> TCP Connections...

This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070
and all the currently established TCP connections.

There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

State State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening


mode or a TCP connection is established.

Local Address Local IP address for this TCP connection.

Local Port Local port number for this TCP connection.

Remote Address Remote IP address for this TCP connection.

Remote Port Remote port number for this TCP connection.

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details
window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 357
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Notes:

All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used
internally.

The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also
be displayed via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol ->
Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport connections.

Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with
"54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.

358 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

13.25 TCP Connections Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the SCOH
symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> TCP Connections...
-> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info
list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 359
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

14 Security

14.1 Access Information

This window is accessible via its toolbar button or via the Main Menu -> Security -> Access
Information...

The window shows the actual access right.

You:

The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".

Nobody:

If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface,
"F-interface" is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 361
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

14.2 NMS NE Password

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...

The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems:

OS, LCT and NCT.

Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in
the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in
the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to
the default password.

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password
and type the new password twice.

Password build rule:

The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.

Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will
be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.

Note:

When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new
password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).

If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.

362 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

14.3 Change Password to Default

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default

Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.

The available default password options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 363
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

15 Software

15.1 Software Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management...

In this window, you can inquire the active and the load state of the inactive application
program system (APS).

Active APS:

Order Number

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

SW/FW Code

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

APS Record...

Opens the Active APS Record window.

Active APS Compatibility...

Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 365
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Inactive APS:

Load State

Load State Description

Not loaded No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE,


and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download

Being loaded Software download in progress

Loaded A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE

Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download

Initialized The software storage medium is prepared for software download

Order Number

Displays the order number of the inactive APS.

SW/FW Code

Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.

Download... / Delta Download...

Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.

Click Open. The Software Download window appears.

If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the
inactive APS to active

Swap APS

With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is
induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the
startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous
APS.

After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.

366 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

15.2 Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file)
-> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 367
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

15.3 Delta Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the
relevant file) -> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

368 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

15.4 APS Compatibility Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...

This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application
Program System) object in a tree structure.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 369
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

15.5 Active APS Record

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> APS Record...

This window displays details of the active APS record.

370 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16 How to ...

16.1 How to Configure the Equipping

1. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE
equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.

2. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of
the selected card type is added to the Module View.

3. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click
Configuration.

How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 371
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.2 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

Configuring a traffic card:

1. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.

2. Select a card from the context menu.

3. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.

4. Click Apply.
The card will be added to the required equipping.

5. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card
-> Configuring -> Port Provisioning.

6. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the
associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).

Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:

1. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.

2. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.

372 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.3 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration
-> Port Provisioning...

2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens.


(An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly
equipped with a SDH interface card.)

3. Select Empty for every unused port.

4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.

5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are
equipped with the same card type and configured properly.

6. Click Apply.

How to Configure the Equipping

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 373
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.4 How to Configure NSAP Settings

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack
Parameters -> Configuration

2. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the
address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.

Note:

The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be
changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.

374 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.5 How to Configure the Timing

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 symbol


-> Configuration...

3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0:


T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of
the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).
Click Apply. Click Close.

4. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration...


In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) used as timing
references.
Click Apply. Click Close.

5. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration...


In the T3 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information
about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)
Click Apply. Click Close.
In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, next to the T3 symbol, select the SA bit(s)
to be used.

6. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system
clock selection.

7. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...

8. In the T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4 and the T4 mode.

9. Click Apply. Click Close.

10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output
selection.

11. Select the SA bit to be used with T4.

12. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can
enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR)
Time.

13. Click Apply. Click Close.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 375
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.6 How to Set Sync Priorities

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of
the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use".
If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will
change the other priorities automatically.

3. Click Apply.

376 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.7 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

1. In the Main Menu, click the Option Settings button.

2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed.
No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.

3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by
highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red instead of flashing red.

4. Click OK.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 377
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.8 How to Suppress Alarms

Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms

1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...
or SEC Alarms...
(In case of an already raised alarm, the corresponding Module View symbol is
highlighted red or flashing red.).

2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).


Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.

3. Click Apply.

Suppressing Communication Alarms

1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol.


(In case of an already raised alarm, the card symbol is highlighted red or flashing red.).

2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Fault
-> Communication Alarms...

3. In the STM-n Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).

4. Click Apply.

378 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.9 How to Create a Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the relevant settings from the fields:
Connection Type, Card A Selection, TP A Selection, Connection Layer, Card B
Selection, TP B Selection, Card B’ Selection, TP B’ Selection. (The B’ selections depend
on the selected Connection Type.)

4. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

5. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
In the TP Selection lists, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks. One asterisk
symbolizes unidirectional, two asterisks symbolize bi-directional connections.

6. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

7. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 379
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.10 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting cross connection filter options:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the
filtering features.

3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cards
depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all cross connection filter settings:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings
change to All.

380 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.11 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connections button -> List...

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type.

4. Select the VC4 Connection Layer.

5. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select an SDH card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

7. If applicable (depending on the connection type),


select an SDH card in the Card B' Selection field, select a TP in the TP B' field.

8. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

9. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 381
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.12 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type.

4. Select the VC3 Connection Layer.

5. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select an SDH card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

7. If applicable (depending on the connection type),


select an SDH card in the Card B’ Selection field, select a TP in the TP B’ field.

8. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

9. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

382 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.13 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type.

4. Select the VC12 Connection Layer.

5. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select an SDH card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

7. If applicable (depending on the connection type),


select an SDH card in the Card B’ Selection field, select a TP in the TP B’ Selection
field.

8. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

9. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 383
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.14 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type.

4. Select the VC3 Connection Layer.

5. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.

7. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic...
(-> Close).

8. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

11. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

384 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.15 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, click the Cross Connection
List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 Connection Layer.

4. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

5. Select an IF2M card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

6. If applicable (depending on the connection type),


select an SDH or IF2M card in the Card B’ Selection field, select a TP in the TP B’
Selection field.

7. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

8. Select the SDH TP Index.

9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

11. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 385
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.16 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an


RPR

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type.

4. Select the Connection Layer.

5. Select an Ethernet card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection
field.

6. Select a PF2G5 card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.

7. You can identify the TP allocation (tributary or ring side) via the GFP Assignment
window.

8. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

11. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

386 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.17 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC
-> Configuration...

2. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to
configure.

3. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window,
or click Performance to open the DCC Linkage Performance window.

4. In these windows, make the relevant settings.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 387
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.18 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprot. Connection
Type.

4. Select the Connection Layer.

5. Line West: Select a card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection
field.

6. Line East: Select a card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.

7. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

10. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

11. Click Add...

12. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidir. Tail End Connection Type.

13. In the Card B Selection and TP B Selection fields, select the same settings as in step 4.

14. In the Card B’ Selection and TP B’ Selection fields, select the same settings as in step 5.

15. Tributary: Select a card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection
field.

16. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

17. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

18. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

19. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

20. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

388 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.19 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprot. Connection
Type.

4. Select the Connection Layer.

5. Select a card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select a card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

7. Select the applicable TP Indexes.

8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

10. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

11. Repeat the steps 1 to 9 depending on the required number of branches, with the same
Card A, TPA and TP index (A) settings.

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 389
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.20 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross
connection in the list.

3. Click Add...

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprot. Connection
Type.

5. Select the same Connection Layer as the existing branches have.

6. Select the same Card A, TP A (and TP Index A if sensitive) as the existing branches
have.

7. Select a card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field, select
TP Index (B) if sensitive.

8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

10. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

390 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.21 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross
connection.

3. Click Delete.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 391
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.22 How to Delete a Cross Connection

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be deleted.

3. Click Delete.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.

392 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.23 How to Create an OH Cross Connection

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list,
select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.

3. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP A entry.

4. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.

5. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.

6. (Click Reset TPs if you want to clear the selection.)

7. To create the selected OH Cross Connection, click Apply.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 393
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.24 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting OH cross connection filter options:

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the fields
Card, Port, OH TP type and Con. State (if applicable) to select the filtering features.

3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cards
depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field
settings change to All.

394 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.25 How to Delete OH Cross Connections

1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross
connection you want to delete from the list. The selected OH cross connection is
displayed in detail in the OH CC Options area.

3. In the Action box, select Disconnect.

4. Click Apply.

5. Confirm the acknowledgement window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 395
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.26 How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

Creating a 1+1 MSP Line Protection:

1. In the Module View, right-click the SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration -> Port
Provisioning..., then choose the Linear MSP (Protection) port of the card (the partner
port number is displayed as Working if it has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before).

2. To create the protection, right-click the slot symbol again. On the submenu, click
Protection. The Protection Management window appears.

3. Select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and click Create. The protection group is
created.

4. In the port list, right-click the symbol, and on the submenu click Subview. The 1+1 MSP
Traffic Flow window for the protection appears.

5. Right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol, and click Configuration. The 1+1 MSP Configuration
window appears.

6. In the MSP Activation box, select Activated and click Apply. The 1+1 MSP protection is
active.

Deleting a 1+1 MSP Line Protection:

1. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, select Deactivate in the MSP Activation box and click
Apply.

2. In the Module View, right-click one of the slot symbols involved in the protection
-> Protection...

3. In the list, select the protection to be deleted and click the Delete button.

4. To remove the protection completely, click the card symbol -> Port Provisioning...
-> Working.

5. Click Apply.

396 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.27 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

Creating an SF2G5 card protection:

1. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.

2. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.

No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF160G card protection:

1. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot (105 in the
double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)

2. Configure an SF160G protecting card in a suitable slot (107 in the double-row subrack,
308 in the single-row subrack)

No further configurations are necessary.

Deleting an SF2G5 or SF160G card protection:

In the Module View, change the protection slot configuration to Empty or to a working card.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 397
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.28 How to Create / Delete VC Channels

Creating VC channels:

1. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.

2. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the VC/VC Group for
the GFP Group.

3. Click Apply.

Deleting VC channels:

1. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.

2. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the GFP Group.

3. Set the VC/VC Group to Unassigned.

4. Click Apply.

Note:

Never delete a VC group as long as still a GFP group is assigned!

398 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.29 How to Configure and Activate Path Protections

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select a cross connection in the list and click
Details.

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, click the cross connection in the list and
configure the Card B’ Selection and TP B’ Selection fields.

4. Click Add Protection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 399
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.30 How to Add and Remove Path Protections

Adding a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection in the list.

3. Click Details...

4. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.

5. Select an item in the Protection, Card B’ Selection and TP B’ Selection fields.

6. Click Add Protection.

Removing a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List, Click Details.

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select a protected cross connection in the list.

4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.

5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.

400 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.31 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection:

1. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS,


IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R card in one of the involved slots and select the 2F Shared Ring
Protection provisioning mode.
In case of empty slots, all 2 involved cards are configured automatically.

2. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection.

3. In the Protection Management List, select the 2F-SPRING line and click Create.

4. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection:


In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "2F Shared Ring..." and select
-> Subview -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration.

5. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

6. In the 2F-SPRING Config window, select Activated in the MSP Activation field.

7. Click Apply.

Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:

1. Deactivate the 2F-SPRING first.

2. Right-click one of the involved cards and select Protection.

3. In the Protection Management List, select the 2F-SPRING line and click Delete.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 401
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.32 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:

8. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, IFS2G5B, IFQ2G5, IFS10G, IFS10G-WLS,


IFS10G-M or IFS10G-R card in one of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring
Protection provisioning mode.
In case of empty slots, all 4 involved cards are configured automatically.

9. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection.

10. In the Protection Management List, select the 4F-SPRING line and click Create.

11. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection:


In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." and select
-> Subview -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.

12. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

13. In the 4F-SPRING Config window, select Activated in the MSP Activation field.

14. Click Apply.

Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:

4. Deactivate the 4F-SPRING first.

5. Right-click one of the involved cards and select Protection.

6. In the Protection Management List, select the 4F-SPRING line and click Delete.

402 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.33 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

Creating an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the card
protection slot number symbol and select the IF2M (CP) card.

2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.

3. Right-click each IF2M card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.

Deleting an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any card
from the protection group by right-clicking the card symbol -> Card Protection
-> Remove from Group.

2. You can remove the protection card in the card protection slot only after all IF2M
working cards have been removed from the protection group.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 403
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.34 How to Create an SNCP Protection

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type: Bidirectional
Protected or Unidirectional Head End or Unidirectional Tail End.

4. Select the Connection Layer (e.g. VC4).

5. Select a card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

6. Select a card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

7. Select a card in the Card B’ Selection field, select a TP in the TP B’ Selection field.

8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

10. Configure the point second end in the same way, starting from step #3.

11. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.

12. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

404 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.35 How to Modify / Delete an SNCP Protection

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified or deleted -> Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Detail window, you can remove or add the SNCP protection to
the unprotected cross connection, or you can delete the SNCP protection.

4. You can switch the SNCP protection manually by right-clicking the corresponding list
entry.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 405
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.36 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path

Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:

1. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to
be prepared -> Subview...

2. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...

3. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...

4. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab,
activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n.
To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.

5. Click the Apply button.

6. If LO concatenation is to be used:
In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create
the required concatenated containers.

Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified -> Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Detail window, select the TP A to be protected.

4. In the Protection Type field, select Bidirectional Protected.

5. In the Card B’ Selection field, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5).

6. In the TP B’ Selection field, select the LO container from the VC4 that has been
structured before.

7. Click the Add Protection button.

Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):

1. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

2. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type: Bidirectional
Protected.

3. Select the Connection Layer VC4.

4. In the Card A Selection and TP A Selection fields, select the LO SF card and VC4
container that have been selected in the previous steps.

5. In the Card B Selection and TP B Selection fields, select the SDH card and VC4
container to be used for the protecting path.

6. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

406 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

7. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

9. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 407
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.37 How to Configure SDH Concatenations

1. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.

2. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.

4. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and
TPs, as applicable.

5. Click Apply.

408 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.38 How to Configure ETH Concatenations

1. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

2. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.

3. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.

4. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 409
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.39 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

1. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol


-> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

2. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value
for the concerned Ethernet port.

3. Click Apply.

Note:

Check the bandwidth sum per port, it must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign
to.
Not fitting bandwidth may cause packet loss!

410 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.40 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

1. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.

2. Select Configuration -> Concatenation... from the context menu of the card.

3. Click Template and select one of the Concatenation Group Templates.

4. Click Apply.

5. Close the Concatenation Config window.

6. Select Configuration -> GFP Assignment from the context menu of the card.

7. In the LP Bandwidth Configuration area, select the GFP Group assignment and enter
the bandwidth for each Ethernet port.

8. Click Apply.

9. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP
group.

10. Click Apply.

11. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.

12. Upload a VCDB for the NE.

Note:

To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross
connection.
If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload
interruption of all channels served by the card.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 411
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.41 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

Creating a CUG:

1. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

2. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

3. Click Port Config.

4. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

5. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

6. Click Apply.

7. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Add CUG to open the PF2G5 Add
CUG window.

Modifying a CUG:

1. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

2. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

3. Click Port Config.

4. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

5. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

6. Click Apply.

7. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, change the CUG settings.

10. Click Apply.

Deleting a CUG:

1. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration


-> GFP Assignment...

412 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

2. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable)..

3. Click Port Config.

4. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

5. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

6. Click Apply.

7. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Remove CUG.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 413
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.42 How to Specify the CUG Service Class

1. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

2. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

3. Click Port Config...

4. In the Config window, select the CUG Mode and click CUG Management
(for configuration details, see PF2G5 GFP Port Configuration).

5. In the CUG Management Config window, Service Class field, select


Static Best Effort for fair access to the available bandwidth
or
Dynamic Prio 0 to Dynamic Prio 7: The service class of an incoming packet can be
determined dynamically based upon the VLAN tag of the packet.

6. Click Apply.

414 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.43 How to Configure RPR Protection

1. In the Module View, click the PF2G5 card symbol.

2. In the port list: Click the PF2G5 symbol -> Subview...

3. In the GFP Traffic Flow window: Right-click the RPR Switch symbol -> Configuration...

4. In the RPR Switch Config window, L2 Switch folder, enter the RPR Node ID.

5. Enter the Protection Wait to Restore Time.

6. Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.


The Hold Off Time makes sure that the L2 protection is not triggered by a MSP, SNCP,
or RPR ring protection switching of other nodes.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 415
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.44 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

1. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.

2. In the GFP Assignment window, LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment


area (as applicable), enter the Ingress Bandwidth and / or Egress Bandwidth for each
involved LP port.

3. Click Apply.

416 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.45 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

1. In the Module View, click a PF2G5 card symbol.

2. In the port list, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol and select Subview from the context
menu.

3. In the GFP Traffic Flow window, right-click the RPR 3 o’clock or RPR 9 o’clock symbol
and select Performance -> RPR Ring from the context menu. The RPR Ring
Performance window opens.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 417
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.46 How to Configure TIF Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...

2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Ground or
Open input contact state for each used TIF port.

418 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.47 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object
to Object

1. In the Module View, select a symbol in the port list -> right-click Subview -> n x VCn or
n x AU4/VC4 -> Selection window -> Copy Data...

2. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox of the configuration you
want to copy, or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.

3. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.

4. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.

5. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.

6. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 419
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.48 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...

2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and
card name.

3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.

4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.

5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

420 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.49 How to Download VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. Set NE State to Idle.

3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.

4. In the Config DB Management window, click Download...


A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

5. Select the path and the file you want to download.

6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.

7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After
the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the
VCDB download is successfully completed.

8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close
to close the window.
Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to
verify which setting is missing).
After removing the error, repeat the download process.

9. After successful download, set the NE to Active. The NE will be initialized automatically.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 421
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.50 How to Upload VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload.


A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.

4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.

5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the
upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB
upload is successfully completed..

Note:

In case of VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

422 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.51 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH


The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see
Equipment Alarms in the Alarm Names, Severities and Remedial Actions list.

The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an
operating SCOH.
The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC.
The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC.
To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again.

If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be
adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack!
Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot.
Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a PowerOff (pulling out the SCOH).

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

For detailed flow charts, see:

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 423
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.52 How to Change a Defective SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

424 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 425
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

426 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.53 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 427
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

428 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 429
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

16.54 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow
chart.

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

430 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 431
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

432 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 433
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Flow Chart Symbol Legend:

434 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17 Fault Clearance

17.1 SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment and MCF alarms related to the SCOH card can occur:

Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"

EOW failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 435
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "DCN Overload"

The Data Communication Network is in an overload state.

1. In case of sporadic DCN Overload alarms:


Avoid any communication with the NE, so that the DCN is not strained additionally. After
a while, the NE should clear the DCN Overload alarm automatically.

2. In case of frequent DCN Overload alarms:


Check the DCN configuration.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Fan Unit"

Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.

1. Replace the fan unit immediately.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1", "Fan Unit 2"

One fan failed or at low speed.

1. Replace the fan unit soon.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm names: "Flash 1 Cfg", "Flash 2 Cfg"

MIB #1 or #2 failed.

1. Replace the SCOH card.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Flash SW"

Flash SW failed.

For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".

2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

436 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.

1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

T0 clock failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

T0X clock set failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"

T0Y clock set failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ULED"

LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.

1. Replace the SCOH card.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 437
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "Unavailable"

SCOH card unavailable.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm Name "Q Link"

Q-interface link interrupted.

1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

438 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• IFO155M

• IFQ622M

• IFQ2G5

• IFS2G5

• IFS10G

• IFS10G-WLS

• IFS10G-M

• IFS10G-R

• IFS40G-MX

• IFQGBE

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 439
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

1. To clock failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

1. T0X clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"

1. T0Y clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

440 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "UTIF #1" to "UTIF #5"

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the fan performance is OK, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the fan performance is OK, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Unavailable"

Card unavailable.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Absent"

The port module is missing.

1. Insert a port module of correct type.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"

The used port module type does not match the card interface.

1. Replace the port module by the correct type.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 441
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

442 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• IF2M

• IFO155M-E

• IFQGBE-E

• IFOFE-E

• IFOFES-E

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:

Alarm name: "Card Disabled"

Card failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 443
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

Internal NE system clock failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "UTIF #01" to "UTIF #n"

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the fan performance is OK, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Unavailable"

Card failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

444 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 445
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• PF2G5

• SF2G5

• SF10G

• SF160G

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

5. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

6. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

7. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

8. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

446 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "T0"

5. To clock failure.

6. Check the timing input.

7. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

8. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

5. T0X clock set failure.

6. Check the timing input.

7. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

8. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"

5. T0Y clock set failure.

6. Check the timing input.

7. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

8. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "UTIF #1" to "UTIF #5" (only with SF2G5 card)

Backplane signal failed.

4. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

5. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

6. If the fan performance is OK, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

Backplane signal failed.

4. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

5. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

6. If the fan performance is OK, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 447
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

Alarm name: "Unavailable"

Card unavailable.

5. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

6. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

7. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

8. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

448 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17.5 Fan Unit Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.

Alarm name: "Fan Fault"

At least one fan is at low speed or failed.

1. See SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance equipment alarm table.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the fan unit according to the following alarm types: "FAN"
and "FanUnit",
see SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 449
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 2.1

17.6 TIF Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:

As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

450 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619

También podría gustarte